blob: ce2f6e3be3cf98d627ff74bb2f6ab173d16cab03 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020024#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040026/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070039 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010042 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070046 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070047 */
48
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040049/**
50 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070051 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070058 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040059 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070071 */
72
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020073/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040074 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010088/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
102 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
108 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
109 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
110 *
111 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
112 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
113 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
114 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
115 * .release_buffered_frames().
116 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
117 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
118 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
119 */
120
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500121struct device;
122
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400123/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200124 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
125 *
126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 */
129enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132};
133
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
135
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800137 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
142 */
143enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
144 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
145 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
148};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200149#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200504 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300505 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
506 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
507 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
508 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100509 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
510 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
511 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200512 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200513 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
514 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
515 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300516 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
517 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200518 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300519 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
520 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200521 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100522 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
523 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
524 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
525 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
526 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
527 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100528 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200529 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
530 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
531 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100532 */
533struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200534 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100535 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200536 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530537 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100538 u16 aid;
539 /* erp related data */
540 bool use_cts_prot;
541 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300542 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200543 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800544 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700545 u16 beacon_int;
546 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200547 u64 sync_tsf;
548 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100549 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100550 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300551 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200552 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200553 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200554 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
555 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100556 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200557 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300558 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100559 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200560 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200561 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300562 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300563 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
564 size_t ssid_len;
565 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200566 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100567 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100568 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200569 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100570};
571
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800572/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200573 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800574 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700575 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800576 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100577 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200578 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
579 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
580 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
581 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
582 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
583 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
584 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
585 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
586 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
587 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
588 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200589 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
591 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200592 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200593 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
594 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200597 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
598 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
599 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
600 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
601 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
602 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
603 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
604 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200605 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
606 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
607 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300608 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
609 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200610 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
611 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
612 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600613 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
614 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
615 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100616 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
617 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
618 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200619 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
620 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200621 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
622 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100623 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
624 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
625 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200626 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
627 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
628 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
629 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100630 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
631 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
632 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100633 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
634 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
635 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200636 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
637 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
638 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400639 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
641 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100642 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
643 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
644 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
645 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200646 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
647 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
648 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530649 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
650 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
651 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200652 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
653 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
654 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200655 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
656 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530657 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
658 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
659 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200660 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
661 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
662 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530663 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
664 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
665 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
666 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
667 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200668 *
669 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
670 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800671 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200672enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
681 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
683 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
684 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
685 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600686 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100687 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100690 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100692 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200698 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530699 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200700 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530703 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200704};
705
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200706#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
707
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200708/**
709 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
710 *
711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
712 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530713 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
714 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100715 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200717 *
718 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
719 */
720enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
721 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530722 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100723 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100724 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200725};
726
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200727/*
728 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
729 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
730 */
731#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
732 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
733 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
734 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
735 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100736 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200737 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200738 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200739
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530740/**
741 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
742 * Rate Control algorithm.
743 *
744 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
745 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
746 *
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
749 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100752 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
753 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530754 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
755 * Greenfield mode.
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100757 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
758 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
759 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
761 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
762 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
764 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200765enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
766 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
767 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
768 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
769
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100770 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200771 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
772 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
773 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
777 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
778 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800779};
780
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200781
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200782/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
783#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200784
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200785/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
786#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
787
788/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200789#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200790
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200791/* maximum number of rate table entries */
792#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
793
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200794/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200795 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200796 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200797 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
798 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200799 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200800 *
801 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
802 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
803 *
804 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
805 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200806 *
807 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
808 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
809 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
810 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
811 * information
812 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
813 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
814 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
815 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
816 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
817 * information should then contain
818 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
819 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
820 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200821 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200822struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
823 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100824 u16 count:5,
825 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000826} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200827
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100828#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
829
830static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
831 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
832{
833 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200834 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
835 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100836}
837
838static inline u8
839ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
840{
841 return rate->idx & 0xF;
842}
843
844static inline u8
845ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
846{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200847 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100848}
849
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200850/**
851 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200852 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200853 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
854 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
855 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
856 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
857 *
858 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200859 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200860 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100861 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700862 * @control: union for control data
863 * @status: union for status data
864 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100865 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700866 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100867 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700868 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200869 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200870 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200871struct ieee80211_tx_info {
872 /* common information */
873 u32 flags;
874 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200875
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200876 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100877
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100878 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100879
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200880 union {
881 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200882 union {
883 /* rate control */
884 struct {
885 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
886 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
887 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200888 u8 use_rts:1;
889 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200890 u8 short_preamble:1;
891 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200892 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200893 };
894 /* only needed before rate control */
895 unsigned long jiffies;
896 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200897 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
899 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200900 u32 flags;
901 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200902 } control;
903 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200904 u64 cookie;
905 } ack;
906 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200907 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200908 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200909 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100910 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200911 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300912 u16 tx_time;
913 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200914 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200915 struct {
916 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
917 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200918 u8 pad[4];
919
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200920 void *rate_driver_data[
921 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
922 };
923 void *driver_data[
924 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200925 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700926};
927
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300928/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200929 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
930 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200931 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
932 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
933 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200934 *
935 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
936 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
937 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
938 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
939 */
940struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200941 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
942 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200943 const u8 *common_ies;
944 size_t common_ie_len;
945};
946
947
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200948static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
949{
950 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
951}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400952
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200953static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
954{
955 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
956}
957
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200958/**
959 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
960 *
961 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
962 *
963 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
964 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
965 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
966 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
967 *
968 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
969 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
970 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
971 */
972static inline void
973ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
974{
975 int i;
976
977 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
978 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
979 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
980 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
981 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
982 /* clear the rate counts */
983 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
984 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
985
986 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200987 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200988 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
989 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
990 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
991}
992
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400993
994/**
995 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
996 *
997 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
998 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
999 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1000 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001001 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1002 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1003 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
1004 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1005 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001006 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1007 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1008 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1009 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001010 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1011 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001012 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1013 * the frame.
1014 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1015 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001016 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001017 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1018 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1019 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001020 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1021 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1022 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001023 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1024 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001025 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001026 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001027 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001028 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1029 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001030 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1031 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001032 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1033 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1034 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001035 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1036 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1037 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001038 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1039 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1040 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1041 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1042 * on this subframe
1043 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1044 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001045 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1046 * done by the hardware
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001047 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001048 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1049 * processing it in any regular way.
1050 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1051 * them for sniffing purposes.
1052 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1053 * monitor interfaces.
1054 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1055 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001056 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001057 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1058 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001059 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1060 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1061 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1062 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1063 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1064 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1065 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1066 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1067 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001068 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1069 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1070 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001071 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1072 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1073 * the first subframe.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001074 */
1075enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001076 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1077 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001078 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001079 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1080 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1081 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1082 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001083 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001084 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1085 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1086 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1087 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1088 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1089 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1090 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001091 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001092 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001093 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1094 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1095 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1096 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001097 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001098 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001099 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001100 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1101 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001102 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001103 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1104 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001105 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001106 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001107 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1108 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001109};
1110
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001111#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1112
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001113/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001114 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1115 *
1116 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1117 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1118 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001119 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001120 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001121 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001122
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001123enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1124 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001125 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1126 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001127};
1128
1129/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001130 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1131 *
1132 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1133 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001134 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001135 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001136 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1137 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001138 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1139 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001140 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1141 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001142 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001143 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001144 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1145 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001146 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1147 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1148 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001149 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1150 * values were filled.
1151 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1152 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001153 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001154 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001155 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1156 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001157 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001158 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001159 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001160 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1161 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1162 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001163 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001164struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1165 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001166 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001167 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001168 u32 ampdu_reference;
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001169 u64 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001170 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001171 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001172 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001173 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001174 u8 rx_flags;
1175 u8 band;
1176 u8 antenna;
1177 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001178 u8 chains;
1179 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001180 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001181};
1182
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001183/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001184 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1185 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1186 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1187 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1188 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1189 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1190 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1191 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1192 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1193 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1194 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1195 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1196 * @data field.
1197 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1198 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1199 * length
1200 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1201 *
1202 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1203 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1204 * data.
1205 */
1206struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1207 u32 present;
1208 u8 align;
1209 u8 oui[3];
1210 u8 subns;
1211 u8 pad;
1212 u16 len;
1213 u8 data[];
1214} __packed;
1215
1216/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001217 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1218 *
1219 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1220 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001221 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1222 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1223 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001224 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1225 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1226 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1227 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1228 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1229 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1230 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001231 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1232 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1233 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1234 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1235 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001236 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1237 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001238 */
1239enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001240 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001241 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001242 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001243 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001244};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001245
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001246
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001247/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001248 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1249 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001250 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001251 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001252 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001253 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001254 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001255 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001256 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001257 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001258 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1259 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001260 */
1261enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001262 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001263 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001264 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001265 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001266 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1267 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1268 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001269 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001270};
1271
1272/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001273 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1274 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001275 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1276 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1277 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1278 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1279 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001280 */
1281enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1282 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1283 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1284 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1285 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1286
1287 /* keep last */
1288 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1289};
1290
1291/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001292 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1293 *
1294 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1295 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001296 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1297 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001298 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001299 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1300 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1301 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001302 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1303 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1304 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1305 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001306 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1307 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001308 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001309 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001310 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001311 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001312 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001313 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1314 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001315 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001316 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1317 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001318 *
1319 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1320 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001321 * configured for an HT channel.
1322 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1323 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001324 */
1325struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001326 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001327 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001328
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001329 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001330 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001331
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001332 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1333
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001334 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001335 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001336 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001337};
1338
1339/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001340 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1341 *
1342 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1343 * operation.
1344 *
1345 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1346 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1347 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1348 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001349 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1350 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001351 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1352 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001353 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001354 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1355 */
1356struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1357 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001358 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001359 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001360 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001361 u8 count;
1362};
1363
1364/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001365 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1366 *
1367 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1368 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001369 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1370 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1371 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1372 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001373 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1374 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1375 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1376 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001377 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1378 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1379 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001380 */
1381enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1382 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001383 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001384 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001385 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001386};
1387
1388/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001389 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1390 *
1391 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1392 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1393 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001394 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001395 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1396 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001397 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001398 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1399 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001400 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1401 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1402 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001403 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001404 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1405 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1406 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1407 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001408 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1409 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001410 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1411 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1412 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1413 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1414 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001415 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001416 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001417 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001418 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1419 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001420 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1421 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001422 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001423 */
1424struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001425 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001426 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001427 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001428 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001429 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001430 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001431
1432 u8 cab_queue;
1433 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1434
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001435 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1436
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001437 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1438
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001439 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001440
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001441#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1442 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1443#endif
1444
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001445 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1446
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001447 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001448 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001449};
1450
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001451static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1452{
1453#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001454 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001455#endif
1456 return false;
1457}
1458
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001459/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001460 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1461 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1462 *
1463 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1464 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1465 *
1466 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1467 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1468 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1469 */
1470struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1471
1472/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001473 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1474 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1475 *
1476 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1477 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1478 *
1479 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1480 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1481 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1482 */
1483struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1484
1485/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001486 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1487 *
1488 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1489 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1490 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001491 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1492 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001493 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1494 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001495 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1496 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1497 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001498 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1499 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001500 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001501 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1502 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001503 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001504 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001505 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001506 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1507 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1508 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001509 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1510 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1511 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1512 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1513 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1514 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1515 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001516 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001517 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001518 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001519 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1520 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1521 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001522 */
1523enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001524 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1525 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1526 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1527 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1528 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1529 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1530 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001531 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001532};
1533
1534/**
1535 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1536 *
1537 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1538 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1539 *
1540 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1541 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001542 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001543 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001544 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1545 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001546 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1547 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1548 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001549 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1550 * data block:
1551 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1552 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1553 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001554 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1555 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001556 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001557struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001558 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001559 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001560 u8 icv_len;
1561 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001562 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001563 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001564 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001565 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001566 u8 key[0];
1567};
1568
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001569#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1570
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001571#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1572#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1573
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001574/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001575 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1576 *
1577 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1578 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1579 * reverse order than in packet)
1580 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1581 * reverse order than in packet)
1582 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1583 * reverse order than in packet)
1584 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1585 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001586 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001587 */
1588struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1589 union {
1590 struct {
1591 u32 iv32;
1592 u16 iv16;
1593 } tkip;
1594 struct {
1595 u8 pn[6];
1596 } ccmp;
1597 struct {
1598 u8 pn[6];
1599 } aes_cmac;
1600 struct {
1601 u8 pn[6];
1602 } aes_gmac;
1603 struct {
1604 u8 pn[6];
1605 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001606 struct {
1607 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1608 u8 seq_len;
1609 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001610 };
1611};
1612
1613/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001614 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1615 *
1616 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1617 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1618 *
1619 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1620 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1621 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1622 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1623 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1624 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1625 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1626 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1627 * key_idx value calculation:
1628 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1629 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1630 */
1631struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1632 u32 cipher;
1633 u16 iftype;
1634 u8 hdr_len;
1635 u8 pn_len;
1636 u8 pn_off;
1637 u8 key_idx_off;
1638 u8 key_idx_mask;
1639 u8 key_idx_shift;
1640 u8 mic_len;
1641};
1642
1643/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001644 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1645 *
1646 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1647 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1648 *
1649 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1650 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1651 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001652enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001653 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001654};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001655
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001656/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001657 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1658 *
1659 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1660 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1661 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1662 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1663 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1664 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1665 */
1666enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1667 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1668 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1669 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1670 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1671 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1672 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1673};
1674
1675/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001676 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1677 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1678 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1679 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1680 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1681 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1682 *
1683 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1684 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1685 */
1686enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1687 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1688 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1689 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1690 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1691};
1692
1693/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001694 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1695 *
1696 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001697 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001698 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1699 */
1700struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1701 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1702 struct {
1703 s8 idx;
1704 u8 count;
1705 u8 count_cts;
1706 u8 count_rts;
1707 u16 flags;
1708 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1709};
1710
1711/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001712 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1713 *
1714 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1715 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1716 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1717 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1718 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001719 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001720 *
1721 * @addr: MAC address
1722 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001723 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001724 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1725 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001726 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1727 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001728 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1729 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001730 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1731 * if wme is supported.
1732 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001733 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001734 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1735 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1736 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1737 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001738 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001739 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001740 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001741 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1742 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301743 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001744 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1745 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1746 * unlimited.
1747 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1748 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1749 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1750 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1751 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1752 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1753 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1754 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1755 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001756 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001757 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001758 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001759 */
1760struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001761 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001762 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1763 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001764 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001765 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001766 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001767 u8 uapsd_queues;
1768 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001769 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001770 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001771 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001772 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001773 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001774 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301775 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001776 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1777 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001778 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001779 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001780
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001781 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1782
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001783 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001784 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001785};
1786
1787/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001788 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1789 *
1790 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301791 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001792 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001793 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1794 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1795 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001796enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001797 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1798};
1799
1800/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001801 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1802 *
1803 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1804 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1805 */
1806struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1807 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1808};
1809
1810/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001811 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1812 *
1813 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1814 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1815 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1816 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001817 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001818 *
1819 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1820 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1821 */
1822struct ieee80211_txq {
1823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1824 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1825 u8 tid;
1826 u8 ac;
1827
1828 /* must be last */
1829 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1830};
1831
1832/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001833 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1834 *
1835 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1836 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1837 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1838 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1839 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1840 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001841 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1842 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1843 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1844 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1845 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1846 * algorithm.
1847 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1848 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1849 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1850 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1851 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1852 * CCK frames.
1853 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001854 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1855 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1856 * the FCS at the end.
1857 *
1858 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1859 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1860 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1861 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1862 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1863 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001864 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001865 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001866 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1867 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1868 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1869 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1870 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001871 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1872 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1873 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1874 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1875 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001876 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1877 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1878 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301879 *
1880 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1881 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001882 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001883 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1884 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1885 *
1886 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1887 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1888 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1889 *
1890 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1891 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001892 *
1893 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1894 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001895 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301896 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1897 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1898 * the stack.
1899 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001900 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001901 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1902 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001903 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001904 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1905 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1906 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001907 *
1908 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1909 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1910 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1911 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1912 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1913 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001914 *
1915 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1916 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1917 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1918 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1919 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1920 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001921 *
1922 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1923 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1924 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001925 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001926 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1927 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1928 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001929 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001930 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1931 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1932 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1933 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001934 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1935 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1936 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1937 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1938 * supported cipher suites.
1939 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001940 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1941 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1942 * for frames.
1943 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001944 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1945 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1946 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1947 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001948 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001949 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1950 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1951 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001952 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1953 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1954 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001955 *
1956 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1957 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001958 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001959 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1960 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1961 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1962 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001963 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1964 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1965 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1966 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001967 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001968 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1969 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1970 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001971 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001972 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001973 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001974 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1975 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1976 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001977 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1978 * within A-MPDU.
1979 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001980 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1981 * for sent beacons.
1982 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001983 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
1984 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
1985 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
1986 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
1987 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02001988 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
1989 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
1990 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
1991 * timeout.
1992 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03001993 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
1994 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
1995 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001996 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
1997 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
1998 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
1999 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2000 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2001 *
2002 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2003 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2004 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002005 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002006 */
2007enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002008 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2009 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2010 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2011 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2012 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2013 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2014 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2015 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2016 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2017 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2018 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2019 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2020 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2021 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2022 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2023 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2024 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2025 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2026 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2027 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2028 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2029 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2030 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2031 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2032 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2033 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2034 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2035 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2036 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002037 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002038 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002039 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002040 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002041 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002042 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002043 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2044 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002045
2046 /* keep last, obviously */
2047 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002048};
2049
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002050/**
2051 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002052 *
2053 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2054 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2055 *
2056 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2057 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2058 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002059 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2060 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002061 *
2062 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2063 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002064 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2065 * along with this structure.
2066 *
2067 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2068 *
2069 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2070 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2071 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002072 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2073 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002074 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002075 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002076 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002077 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002078 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002079 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002080 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002081 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002082 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2083 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2084 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002085 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2086 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2087 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002088 *
2089 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2090 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002091 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2092 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002093 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2094 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002095 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2096 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002097 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002098 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2099 * can handle.
2100 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2101 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002102 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002103 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002104 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2105 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2106 * aggregation.
2107 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2108 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2109 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002110 *
2111 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002112 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2113 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2114 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2115 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002116 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002117 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2118 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2119 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002120 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2121 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002122 *
2123 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2124 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2125 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2126 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002127 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002128 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2129 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2130 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2131 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002132 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002133 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2134 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002135 *
2136 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2137 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2138 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2139 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2140 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2141 * neither enabled.
2142 *
2143 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2144 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2145 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002146 *
2147 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2148 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2149 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002150 *
2151 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2152 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002153 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002154struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002155 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002156 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002157 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002158 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002159 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002160 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002161 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002162 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002163 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002164 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002165 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002166 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002167 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002168 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002169 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002170 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002171 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002172 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002173 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002174 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002175 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002176 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002177 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002178 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002179 u8 uapsd_queues;
2180 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002181 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2182 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002183 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002184};
2185
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002186static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2187 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2188{
2189 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2190}
2191#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2192
2193static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2194 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2195{
2196 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2197}
2198#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2199
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002200/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002201 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2202 *
2203 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2204 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2205 */
2206struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2207 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2208
2209 /* Keep last */
2210 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2211};
2212
2213/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002214 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2215 *
2216 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2217 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2218 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2219 * @status: channel-switch response status
2220 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2221 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2222 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2223 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2224 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2225 */
2226struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2227 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2228 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2229 u8 action_code;
2230 u32 status;
2231 u32 timestamp;
2232 u16 switch_time;
2233 u16 switch_timeout;
2234 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2235 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2236};
2237
2238/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002239 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2240 *
2241 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2242 *
2243 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2244 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2245 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2246 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2247 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002248 *
2249 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002250 */
2251struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2252
2253/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002254 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2255 *
2256 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2257 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2258 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002259static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2260{
2261 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2262}
2263
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002264/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002265 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002266 *
2267 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2268 * @addr: the address to set
2269 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002270static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002271{
2272 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2273}
2274
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002275static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2276ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002277 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002278{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002279 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002280 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002281 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002282}
2283
2284static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2285ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002286 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002287{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002288 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002289 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002290 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002291}
2292
2293static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2294ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002295 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002296{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002297 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002298 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002299 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002300}
2301
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002302/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002303 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2304 * @hw: the hardware
2305 * @skb: the skb
2306 *
2307 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2308 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2309 */
2310void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2311
2312/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002313 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002314 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002315 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2316 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2317 *
2318 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2319 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002320 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2321 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2322 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002323 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2324 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2325 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002326 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2327 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2328 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2329 *
2330 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2331 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2332 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2333 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2334 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002335 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2336 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2337 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2338 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2339 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002340 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2341 *
2342 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2343 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2344 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2345 * based on the receive flags.
2346 *
2347 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2348 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2349 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2350 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002351 *
2352 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2353 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2354 * handler.
2355 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002356 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002357 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2358 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002359 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002360 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002361 *
2362 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2363 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2364 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002365 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002366
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002367/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002368 * DOC: Powersave support
2369 *
2370 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2371 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002372 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2373 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2374 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2375 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2376 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2377 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2378 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2379 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002380 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002381 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2382 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2383 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002384 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2385 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002386 *
2387 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2388 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2389 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002390 *
2391 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2392 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2393 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2394 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002395 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2396 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002397 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002398 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002399 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2400 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2401 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2402 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2403 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2404 * periods.
2405 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002406 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002407 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2408 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2409 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2410 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2411 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2412 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2413 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2414 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2415 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2416 *
2417 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002418 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002419 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002420 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2421 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2422 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2423 *
2424 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2425 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002426 */
2427
2428/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002429 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2430 *
2431 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002432 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002433 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2434 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2435 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2436 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2437 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2438 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002439 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2440 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002441 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2442 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2443 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2444 *
2445 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2446 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2447 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2448 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2449 *
2450 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2451 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2452 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2453 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2454 * - a list of information element IDs
2455 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2456 *
2457 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2458 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2459 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2460 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2461 * vendor information elements.
2462 *
2463 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2464 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2465 *
2466 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2467 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2468 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2469 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2470 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2471 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2472 *
2473 *
2474 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2475 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2476 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2477 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2478 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2479 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2480 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2481 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2482 *
2483 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2484 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2485 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002486 */
2487
2488/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002489 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2490 *
2491 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2492 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2493 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2494 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2495 *
2496 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2497 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2498 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2499 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2500 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2501 * hardware flags.
2502 *
2503 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2504 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2505 * turned off otherwise.
2506 *
2507 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2508 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2509 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2510 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2511 */
2512
2513/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002514 * DOC: Frame filtering
2515 *
2516 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2517 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2518 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2519 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2520 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2521 *
2522 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2523 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2524 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2525 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002526 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2527 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2528 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2529 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2530 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2531 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2532 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002533 *
2534 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2535 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2536 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2537 * or dropped.
2538 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002539 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2540 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2541 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2542 * the flag, but not clear it.
2543 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2544 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2545 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2546 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2547 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2548 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2549 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2550 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002551 */
2552
2553/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002554 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2555 *
2556 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2557 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2558 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2559 *
2560 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2561 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2562 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2563 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2564 * the driver code.
2565 *
2566 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2567 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2568 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2569 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2570 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2571 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2572 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2573 *
2574 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2575 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2576 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2577 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2578 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2579 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2580 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2581 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2582 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2583 * @sta_notify callback.
2584 *
2585 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2586 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2587 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2588 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2589 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2590 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2591 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002592 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002593 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2594 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2595 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2596 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2597 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2598 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2599 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002600 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2601 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2602 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002603 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2604 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2605 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2606 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2607 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2608 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2609 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2610 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2611 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2612 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2613 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2614 *
2615 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2616 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2617 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2618 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2619 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2620 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2621 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2622 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2623 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2624 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002625 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002626 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2627 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2628 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2629 *
2630 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2631 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2632 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2633 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2634 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002635 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002636 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2637 *
2638 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2639 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2640 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2641 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002642 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002643 *
2644 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2645 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2646 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2647 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002648 */
2649
2650/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002651 * DOC: HW queue control
2652 *
2653 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2654 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2655 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2656 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2657 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2658 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2659 *
2660 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2661 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2662 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2663 *
2664 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2665 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2666 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2667 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2668 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2669 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2670 * the hardware queue.
2671 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2672 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2673 *
2674 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2675 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2676 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2677 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2678 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2679 *
2680 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2681 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2682 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2683 * off-channel queue: 9
2684 *
2685 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2686 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2687 *
2688 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2689 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2690 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2691 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2692 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2693 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2694 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2695 *
2696 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2697 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2698 *
2699 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2700 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2701 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2702 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2703 */
2704
2705/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002706 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2707 *
2708 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2709 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2710 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2711 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2712 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002713 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2714 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2715 * multicast address.
2716 *
2717 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2718 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2719 *
2720 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2721 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2722 *
2723 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2724 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2725 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2726 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2727 * honour this flag if possible.
2728 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002729 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2730 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002731 *
2732 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002733 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002734 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002735 *
2736 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002737 */
2738enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002739 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2740 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2741 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2742 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2743 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2744 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002745 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002746 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002747};
2748
2749/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002750 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2751 *
2752 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2753 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002754 *
2755 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2756 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002757 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002758 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2759 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002760 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2761 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2762 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002763 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002764 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2765 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2766 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2767 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2768 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2769 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2770 * session is gone and removes the station.
2771 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2772 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2773 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2774 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002775 */
2776enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2777 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2778 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002779 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002780 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2781 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2782 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002783 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002784};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002785
2786/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002787 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2788 *
2789 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2790 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2791 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2792 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2793 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2794 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2795 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2796 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2797 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2798 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2799 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2800 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2801 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2802 */
2803struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2804 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2805 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2806 u16 tid;
2807 u16 ssn;
2808 u8 buf_size;
2809 bool amsdu;
2810 u16 timeout;
2811};
2812
2813/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002814 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2815 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002816 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2817 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002818 */
2819enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2820 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002821 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002822};
2823
2824/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002825 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2826 *
2827 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002828 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2829 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2830 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002831 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002832 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2833 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2834 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002835 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2836 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002837 */
2838enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2839 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2840 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002841 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002842 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002843};
2844
2845/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002846 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2847 *
2848 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2849 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2850 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2851 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2852 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2853 *
2854 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2855 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2856 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2857 */
2858enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2859 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2860 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2861};
2862
2863/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002864 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2865 *
2866 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2867 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2868 *
2869 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2870 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2871 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2872 * of wowlan configuration)
2873 */
2874enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2875 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2876 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2877};
2878
2879/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002880 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2881 *
2882 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2883 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2884 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2885 *
2886 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2887 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2888 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002889 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002890 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002891 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002892 *
2893 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2894 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2895 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2896 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2897 * or zero.
2898 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2899 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2900 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002901 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002902 *
2903 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2904 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2905 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2906 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002907 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2908 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002909 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002910 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002911 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2912 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2913 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2914 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2915 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002916 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2917 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2918 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2919 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002920 *
2921 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2922 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2923 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2924 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2925 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2926 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002927 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2928 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2929 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2930 * in suspend().
2931 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002932 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002933 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002934 * and @stop must be implemented.
2935 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2936 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2937 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2938 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2939 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002940 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002941 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002942 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2943 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2944 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2945 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2946 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2947 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002948 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2949 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2950 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2951 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2952 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2953 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2954 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002955 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002956 *
2957 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2958 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002959 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002960 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002961 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002962 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2963 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2964 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2965 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2966 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002967 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2968 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002969 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002970 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2971 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2972 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2973 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002974 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2975 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002976 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002977 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03002978 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
2979 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
2980 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
2981 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
2982 * which flags are changed.
2983 * This callback can sleep.
2984 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002985 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002986 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002987 *
2988 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002989 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2990 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002991 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002992 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002993 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002994 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002995 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2996 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2997 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002998 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002999 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003000 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3001 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3002 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3003 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3004 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3005 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003006 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3007 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3008 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3009 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003010 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003011 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003012 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3013 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003014 * that power save is disabled.
3015 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3016 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3017 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3018 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3019 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3020 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3021 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003022 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003023 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003024 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3025 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3026 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3027 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3028 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3029 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3030 * The callback can sleep.
3031 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003032 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3033 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3034 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3035 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3036 *
3037 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003038 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003039 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003040 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3041 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003042 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3043 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3044 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003045 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003046 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3047 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3048 * this notification.
3049 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003050 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003051 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3052 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003053 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003054 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003055 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3056 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3057 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003058 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003059 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003060 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3061 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
3062 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
3063 * The callback can sleep.
3064 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003065 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003066 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003067 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003068 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3069 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3070 *
3071 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003072 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3073 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3074 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3075 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3076 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003077 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303078 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3079 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3080 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3081 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
3082 *
3083 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
3084 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
3085 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003086 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003087 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3088 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3089 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003090 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003091 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3092 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3093 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3094 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003095 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3096 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3097 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3098 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3099 * The callback can sleep.
3100 *
3101 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3102 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3103 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3104 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3105 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003106 * The callback can sleep.
3107 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003108 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3109 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3110 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3111 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3112 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3113 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3114 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003115 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3116 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3117 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003118 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003119 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3120 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3121 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3122 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3123 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3124 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3125 * The callback can sleep.
3126 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003127 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003128 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003129 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003130 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003131 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003132 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003133 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003134 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003135 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003136 *
3137 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003138 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003139 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003140 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003141 *
3142 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3143 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3144 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3145 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003146 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003147 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003148 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3149 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3150 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003151 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003152 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003153 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003154 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3155 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3156 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003157 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003158 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003159 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003160 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3161 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3162 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3163 * - TX: 1.....7
3164 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3165 * - TX: 8..1...
3166 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3167 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3168 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3169 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3170 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003171 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003172 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003173 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003174 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3175 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003176 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3177 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3178 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003179 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003180 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003181 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3182 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003183 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3184 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3185 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003186 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003187 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3188 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003189 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003190 *
3191 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003192 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3193 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3194 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3195 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003196 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003197 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003198 *
3199 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3200 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3201 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3202 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003203 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003204 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3205 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3206 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3207 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3208 *
3209 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003210 *
3211 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3212 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3213 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3214 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3215 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3216 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003217 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003218 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3219 * must be accepted in this case.
3220 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003221 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3222 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003223 *
3224 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3225 *
3226 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303227 *
3228 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3229 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303230 *
3231 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3232 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3233 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003234 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3235 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003236 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003237 *
3238 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3239 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3240 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3241 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003242 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003243 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3244 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3245 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3246 * more-data bit must always be set.
3247 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3248 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003249 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3250 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3251 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3252 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3253 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3254 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003255 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3256 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3257 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003258 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3259 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003260 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003261 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003262 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003263 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3264 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3265 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003266 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003267 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3268 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3269 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3270 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003271 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003272 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003273 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3274 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3275 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003276 *
3277 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3278 *
3279 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3280 *
3281 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3282 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3283 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003284 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3285 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3286 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3287 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3288 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3289 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3290 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3291 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3292 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3293 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3294 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3295 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003296 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003297 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3298 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3299 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3300 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3301 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3302 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3303 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3304 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3305 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003306 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303307 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003308 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303309 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003310 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3311 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3312 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303313 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003314 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3315 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303316 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003317 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3318 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303319 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003320 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3321 * another, as specified in the list of
3322 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3323 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303324 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003325 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003326 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3327 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3328 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3329 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3330 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3331 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3332 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003333 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003334 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3335 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3336 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3337 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3338 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003339 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003340 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3341 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3342 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003343 *
3344 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3345 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3346 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003347 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003348 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3349 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003350 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003351 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003352 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3353 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003354 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3355 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3356 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3357 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003358 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3359 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3360 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003361 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003362 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3363 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3364 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3365 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003366 *
3367 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3368 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3369 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003370 *
3371 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3372 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003373 *
3374 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3375 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3376 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3377 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3378 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3379 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3380 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3381 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3382 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003383 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3384 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3385 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3386 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3387 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3388 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3389 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003390 *
3391 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003392 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3393 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3394 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3395 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003396 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003397struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003398 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3399 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3400 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003401 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003402 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003403#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3404 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3405 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003406 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003407#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003408 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003409 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003410 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3411 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003412 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003413 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003415 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003416 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3417 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3418 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3419 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003420
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003421 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3422 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3423
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003424 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003425 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003426 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3427 unsigned int changed_flags,
3428 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003429 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003430 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3431 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3432 unsigned int filter_flags,
3433 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003434 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3435 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003436 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003437 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003438 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003439 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003440 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3441 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3442 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3443 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003444 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3445 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3446 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003447 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3448 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003449 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003450 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003451 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3452 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003453 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3454 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3455 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003456 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003457 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003459 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3461 const u8 *mac_addr);
3462 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3463 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003464 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3465 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003466 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3467 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3468 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003469 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003470 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003471 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3472 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3473 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3474 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303475#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3476 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3477 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3478 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3479 struct dentry *dir);
3480 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3481 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3482 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3483 struct dentry *dir);
3484#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003485 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003486 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003487 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3488 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3489 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3490 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003491 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3493 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003494 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3496 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3497 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003498 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3500 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003501 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3503 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3504 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003505 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003507 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003508 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3509 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3510 u64 tsf);
3511 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003512 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003513 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003514 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003515 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003516 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3517 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003518 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003519 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003520#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003521 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3522 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003523 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3524 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3525 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003526#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003527 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3528 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003529 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003531 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003532 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3533 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003534
3535 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003536 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003537 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003538 int duration,
3539 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003540 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003541 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3542 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3543 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303544 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303545 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3546 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003547 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3548 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3549 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003550
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003551 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3552 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3553 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3554 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3555 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003556 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3557 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3558 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3559 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3560 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003561
3562 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3564 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3565 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3566 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3567 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3568 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3569 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003570
3571 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3572 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003573
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003574 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3575 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3576
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003577 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3578 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3579 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3580 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3581 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3582 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3583 u32 changed);
3584 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3585 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3586 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3587 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3589 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003590 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3591 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3592 int n_vifs,
3593 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003594
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003595 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3596 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003597
3598#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3599 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3600 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3601 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3602#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003603 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3604 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3605 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003606 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3608 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003609
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003610 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3611 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3612
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003613 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3614 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003615 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003616 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3617 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003618
3619 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3621 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3622 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003623 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003624 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3625 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3626 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003627 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3629 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003630
3631 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3632 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003633 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003634};
3635
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003636/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003637 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3638 *
3639 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3640 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3641 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3642 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3643 * @priv_data_len.
3644 *
3645 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3646 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3647 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3648 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3649 *
3650 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3651 */
3652struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3653 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3654 const char *requested_name);
3655
3656/**
3657 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003658 *
3659 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3660 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3661 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3662 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3663 * @priv_data_len.
3664 *
3665 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3666 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003667 *
3668 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003669 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003670static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003671struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003672 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3673{
3674 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3675}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003676
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003677/**
3678 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3679 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003680 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3681 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3682 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003683 *
3684 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003685 *
3686 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003687 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003688int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3689
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003690/**
3691 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3692 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3693 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3694 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3695 */
3696struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3697 int throughput;
3698 int blink_time;
3699};
3700
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003701/**
3702 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3703 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3704 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3705 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3706 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3707 */
3708enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3709 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3710 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3711 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3712};
3713
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003714#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003715const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3716const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3717const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3718const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3719const char *
3720__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3721 unsigned int flags,
3722 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3723 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003724#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003725/**
3726 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3727 *
3728 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3729 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3730 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3731 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3732 *
3733 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003734 *
3735 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003736 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003737static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003738{
3739#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3740 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3741#else
3742 return NULL;
3743#endif
3744}
3745
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003746/**
3747 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3748 *
3749 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3750 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3751 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3752 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3753 *
3754 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003755 *
3756 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003757 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003758static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003759{
3760#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3761 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3762#else
3763 return NULL;
3764#endif
3765}
3766
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003767/**
3768 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3769 *
3770 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3771 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3772 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3773 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3774 *
3775 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003776 *
3777 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003778 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003779static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003780{
3781#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3782 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3783#else
3784 return NULL;
3785#endif
3786}
3787
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003788/**
3789 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3790 *
3791 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3792 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3793 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3794 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3795 *
3796 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003797 *
3798 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003799 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003800static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003801{
3802#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3803 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3804#else
3805 return NULL;
3806#endif
3807}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003808
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003809/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003810 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3811 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003812 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003813 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3814 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3815 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003816 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3817 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3818 *
3819 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003820 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003821static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003822ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003823 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3824 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3825{
3826#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003827 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003828 blink_table_len);
3829#else
3830 return NULL;
3831#endif
3832}
3833
3834/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003835 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3836 *
3837 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3838 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3839 *
3840 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3841 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003842void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3843
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003844/**
3845 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3846 *
3847 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3848 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003849 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003850 *
3851 * @hw: the hardware to free
3852 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003853void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3854
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003855/**
3856 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3857 *
3858 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3859 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3860 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3861 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3862 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3863 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3864 *
3865 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3866 */
3867void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3868
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003869/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003870 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003871 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003872 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3873 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3874 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3875 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3876 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3877 *
3878 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3879 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3880 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3881 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3882 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3883 *
3884 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3885 *
3886 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003887 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003888 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3889 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003890 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003891void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3892 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003893
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003894/**
3895 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3896 *
3897 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003898 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3899 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3900 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3901 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003902 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003903 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003904 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3905 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003906 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3907 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003908 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003909 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003910 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003911 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3912 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003913 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003914static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3915{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003916 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003917}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003918
3919/**
3920 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3921 *
3922 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003923 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3924 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003925 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003926 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3927 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003928 *
3929 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3930 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003931 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003932void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003933
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003934/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003935 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3936 *
3937 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3938 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3939 *
3940 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003941 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3942 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003943 *
3944 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3945 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3946 */
3947static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3948 struct sk_buff *skb)
3949{
3950 local_bh_disable();
3951 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3952 local_bh_enable();
3953}
3954
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003955/**
3956 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3957 *
3958 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3959 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3960 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3961 *
3962 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3963 *
3964 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3965 * each other.
3966 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003967 * @sta: currently connected sta
3968 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003969 *
3970 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003971 */
3972int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3973
3974/**
3975 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3976 * (in process context)
3977 *
3978 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3979 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3980 * applies.
3981 *
3982 * @sta: currently connected sta
3983 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003984 *
3985 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003986 */
3987static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3988 bool start)
3989{
3990 int ret;
3991
3992 local_bh_disable();
3993 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3994 local_bh_enable();
3995
3996 return ret;
3997}
3998
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003999/*
4000 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4001 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4002 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004003#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004004
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004005/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004006 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004007 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004008 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4009 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004010 *
4011 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004012 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4013 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004014 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004015 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4016 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4017 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4018 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4019 *
4020 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4021 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4022 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4023 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4024 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4025 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4026 *
4027 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4028 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4029 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4030 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4031 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004032 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004033void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4034 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004035
4036/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004037 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4038 *
4039 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4040 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4041 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4042 *
4043 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4044 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4045 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4046 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4047 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4048 */
4049void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4051 struct sk_buff *skb,
4052 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4053 int max_rates);
4054
4055/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004056 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4057 *
4058 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4059 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4060 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4061 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004062 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4063 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004064 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004065 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4066 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004067 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004068 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4069 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004070 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004071void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004072 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004073
4074/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004075 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4076 *
4077 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4078 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4079 * specific skbs.
4080 *
4081 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4082 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4083 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4084 *
4085 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4086 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4087 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4088 * @info: tx status information
4089 */
4090void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4092 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4093
4094/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004095 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4096 *
4097 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4098 *
4099 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4100 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4101 * for a single hardware.
4102 *
4103 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4104 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4105 */
4106static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4107 struct sk_buff *skb)
4108{
4109 local_bh_disable();
4110 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4111 local_bh_enable();
4112}
4113
4114/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004115 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004116 *
4117 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4118 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4119 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004120 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4121 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004122 *
4123 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4124 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004125 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004126void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004127 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004128
4129/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004130 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4131 *
4132 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4133 * connected STA.
4134 *
4135 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4136 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4137 */
4138void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4139
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004140#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4141
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004142/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004143 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4144 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4145 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004146 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4147 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4148 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004149 */
4150struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4151 u16 tim_offset;
4152 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004153
4154 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004155};
4156
4157/**
4158 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4159 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4160 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4161 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4162 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4163 *
4164 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4165 * obtain the beacon template.
4166 *
4167 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4168 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004169 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4170 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004171 *
4172 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4173 *
4174 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4175 */
4176struct sk_buff *
4177ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4180
4181/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004182 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4183 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004184 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004185 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4186 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4187 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4188 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4189 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4190 *
4191 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004192 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004193 *
4194 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4195 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004196 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4197 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004198 *
4199 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004200 *
4201 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004202 */
4203struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4205 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4206
4207/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004208 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4209 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004211 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004212 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004213 *
4214 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004215 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004216static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4218{
4219 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4220}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004221
4222/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004223 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4224 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4225 *
4226 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4227 * This function is called implicitly when
4228 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4229 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4230 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4231 *
4232 * Return: new csa counter value
4233 */
4234u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4235
4236/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004237 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4238 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4239 *
4240 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004241 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004242 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4243 */
4244void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4245
4246/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004247 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004248 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4249 *
4250 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4251 */
4252bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4253
4254
4255/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004256 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4257 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4258 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4259 *
4260 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4261 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4262 *
4263 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004264 *
4265 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004266 */
4267struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4269
4270/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004271 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4272 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4273 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4274 *
4275 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4276 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4277 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4278 *
4279 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4280 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004281 *
4282 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004283 */
4284struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4286
4287/**
4288 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4289 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4290 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4291 *
4292 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4293 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4294 * BSSID and address is used.
4295 *
4296 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4297 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004298 *
4299 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004300 */
4301struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4302 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4303
4304/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004305 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4306 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004307 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004308 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4309 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004310 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004311 *
4312 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4313 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004314 *
4315 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004316 */
4317struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004318 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004319 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004320 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004321
4322/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004323 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4324 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004325 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004326 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4327 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004328 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004329 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4330 *
4331 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4332 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4333 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4334 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4335 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004336void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004337 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004338 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004339 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4340
4341/**
4342 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4343 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004344 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004345 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004346 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004347 *
4348 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4349 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4350 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004351 *
4352 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004353 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004354__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4355 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004356 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004357
4358/**
4359 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4360 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004361 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004362 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4363 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004364 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004365 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4366 *
4367 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4368 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4369 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4370 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4371 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004372void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4373 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004374 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004375 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004376 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4377
4378/**
4379 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4380 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004381 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004382 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004383 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004384 *
4385 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4386 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4387 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004388 *
4389 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004390 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004391__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4392 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004393 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004394 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004395
4396/**
4397 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4398 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004399 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004400 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004401 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004402 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004403 *
4404 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4405 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004406 *
4407 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004408 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004409__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004411 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004412 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004413 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004414
4415/**
4416 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4417 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004418 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004419 *
4420 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4421 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4422 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4423 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004424 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4425 *
4426 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4427 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004428 *
4429 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4430 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4431 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4432 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4433 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4434 * use common code for all beacons.
4435 */
4436struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004437ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004438
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004439/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004440 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4441 *
4442 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4443 *
4444 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4445 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4446 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4447 */
4448void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4449 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4450
4451/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004452 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004453 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004454 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4455 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004456 *
4457 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004458 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4459 * with this P1K
4460 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004461 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004462static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4463 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4464{
4465 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4466 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4467 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4468
4469 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4470}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004471
4472/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004473 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4474 *
4475 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4476 * and transmitter address.
4477 *
4478 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4479 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4480 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4481 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4482 */
4483void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4484 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4485
4486/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004487 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4488 *
4489 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4490 * in the packet.
4491 *
4492 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4493 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4494 * encrypted with this key
4495 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4496 */
4497void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4498 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004499
4500/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004501 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4502 *
4503 * @pos: start of crypto header
4504 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4505 * @pn: PN to add
4506 *
4507 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4508 * the packet payload)
4509 *
4510 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4511 * point to the crypto header)
4512 */
4513u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4514
4515/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004516 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4517 *
4518 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004519 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004520 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4521 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4522 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4523 *
4524 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4525 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4526 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4527 *
4528 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4529 * can be done concurrently.
4530 */
4531void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4532 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4533
4534/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004535 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4536 *
4537 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004538 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004539 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4540 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4541 * @seq: new sequence data
4542 *
4543 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4544 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4545 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4546 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4547 *
4548 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4549 * can be done concurrently.
4550 */
4551void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4552 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4553
4554/**
4555 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4556 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4557 *
4558 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4559 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4560 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4561 *
4562 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4563 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4564 */
4565void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4566
4567/**
4568 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4569 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4570 * @keyconf: new key data
4571 *
4572 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4573 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4574 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4575 *
4576 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4577 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4578 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4579 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4580 *
4581 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4582 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4583 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4584 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4585 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4586 * of the reconfiguration.
4587 *
4588 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4589 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4590 *
4591 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4592 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4593 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4594 * the key that's being replaced.
4595 */
4596struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4597ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4598 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4599
4600/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004601 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4602 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4603 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4604 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4605 * @gfp: allocation flags
4606 */
4607void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4608 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4609
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004610/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004611 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4612 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4613 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4614 *
4615 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4616 */
4617void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4618
4619/**
4620 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4621 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4622 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4623 *
4624 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4625 */
4626void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4627
4628/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004629 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4630 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4631 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4632 *
4633 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004634 *
4635 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004636 */
4637
4638int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4639
4640/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004641 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4642 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4643 *
4644 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4645 */
4646void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4647
4648/**
4649 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4650 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4651 *
4652 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4653 */
4654void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4655
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004656/**
4657 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4658 *
4659 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4660 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004661 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4662 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004663 *
4664 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004665 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004666 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004667void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004668
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004669/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004670 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4671 *
4672 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4673 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4674 *
4675 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4676 */
4677void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4678
4679/**
4680 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4681 *
4682 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4683 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4684 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4685 * while associating, for instance.
4686 *
4687 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4688 */
4689void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4690
4691/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004692 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4693 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4694 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4695 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4696 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4697 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4698 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4699 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004700 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004701 */
4702enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4703 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4704 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004705 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004706};
4707
4708/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004709 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4710 *
4711 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4712 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4713 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4714 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4715 *
4716 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4717 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4718 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4719 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4720 */
4721void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4722 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4723 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4724 void *data);
4725
4726/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004727 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004728 *
4729 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4730 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004731 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4732 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4733 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004734 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004735 *
4736 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004737 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004738 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004739 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4740 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004741static inline void
4742ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4743 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4745 void *data)
4746{
4747 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4748 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4749 iterator, data);
4750}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004751
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004752/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004753 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4754 *
4755 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4756 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4757 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4758 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004759 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004760 *
4761 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004762 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004763 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4764 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4765 */
4766void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004767 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004768 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4769 u8 *mac,
4770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4771 void *data);
4772
4773/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004774 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4775 *
4776 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4777 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4778 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4779 *
4780 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4781 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4782 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4783 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4784 */
4785void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4786 u32 iter_flags,
4787 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4788 u8 *mac,
4789 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4790 void *data);
4791
4792/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004793 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4794 *
4795 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4796 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4797 * function for them.
4798 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4799 *
4800 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4801 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4802 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4803 */
4804void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4805 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4806 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4807 void *data);
4808/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004809 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4810 *
4811 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4812 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4813 *
4814 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4815 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4816 */
4817void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4818
4819/**
4820 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4821 *
4822 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4823 * workqueue.
4824 *
4825 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4826 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4827 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4828 */
4829void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4830 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4831 unsigned long delay);
4832
4833/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004834 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004835 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004836 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304837 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004838 *
4839 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004840 *
4841 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4842 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4843 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4844 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304845int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4846 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004847
4848/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004849 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004850 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004851 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4852 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4853 *
4854 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004855 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4856 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004857 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004858void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004859 u16 tid);
4860
4861/**
4862 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004863 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004864 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004865 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004866 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004867 *
4868 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4869 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4870 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4871 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004872int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004873
4874/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004875 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004876 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004877 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4878 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4879 *
4880 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004881 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4882 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004883 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004884void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004885 u16 tid);
4886
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004887/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004888 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4889 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004890 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004891 * @addr: station's address
4892 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004893 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4894 *
4895 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004896 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4897 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004898struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004899 const u8 *addr);
4900
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004901/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004902 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004903 *
4904 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004905 * @addr: remote station's address
4906 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004907 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004908 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4909 *
4910 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004911 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4912 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004913 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4914 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4915 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4916 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4917 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4918 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4919 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004920 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004921 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004922 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004923struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4924 const u8 *addr,
4925 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004926
4927/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004928 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4929 * @hw: the hardware
4930 * @pubsta: the station
4931 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4932 *
4933 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4934 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4935 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4936 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4937 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4938 *
4939 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4940 * manner.
4941 *
4942 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4943 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4944 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4945 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4946 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4947 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4948 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4949 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4950 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4951 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4952 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4953 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4954 * woke up while blocked or not.
4955 */
4956void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4957 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4958
4959/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004960 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4961 * @pubsta: the station
4962 *
4963 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4964 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4965 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4966 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4967 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004968 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4969 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4970 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4971 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4972 *
4973 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4974 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4975 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4976 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004977 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004978void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004979
4980/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02004981 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
4982 * @pubsta: the station
4983 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
4984 *
4985 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
4986 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
4987 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
4988 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
4989 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
4990 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
4991 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
4992 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
4993 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
4994 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
4995 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
4996 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
4997 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
4998 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
4999 */
5000void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5001
5002/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005003 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5004 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5005 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5006 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5007 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5008 *
5009 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5010 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5011 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5012 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5013 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5014 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005015 *
5016 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5017 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5018 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005019 */
5020void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5021 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5022 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5023 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5024 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5025 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5026 void *data),
5027 void *iter_data);
5028
5029/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005030 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5031 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5032 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5033 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5034 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5035 *
5036 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5037 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5038 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5039 * in removal process will be skipped.
5040 *
5041 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5042 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5043 */
5044void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5046 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5048 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5049 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5050 void *data),
5051 void *iter_data);
5052
5053/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005054 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5055 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5056 * @iter: iterator function
5057 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5058 *
5059 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5060 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5061 * places while calling into the driver.
5062 *
5063 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5064 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5065 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005066 *
5067 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5068 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5069 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5070 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005071 */
5072void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5073 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5074 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5075 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5076 void *data),
5077 void *iter_data);
5078
5079/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005080 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5081 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5083 *
5084 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5085 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5086 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5087 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5088 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005089 * %NULL.
5090 *
5091 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005092 */
5093struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5095
5096/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005097 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5098 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005099 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005100 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005101 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005102 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005103 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5104 */
5105void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005106
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005107/**
5108 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5109 *
5110 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5111 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005112 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005113 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5114 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005115 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5116 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005117 *
5118 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5119 * without connection recovery attempts.
5120 */
5121void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5122
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005123/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005124 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5125 *
5126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5127 *
5128 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5129 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5130 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5131 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5132 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5133 *
5134 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5135 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5136 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5137 * disconnect normally later.
5138 *
5139 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5140 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5141 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5142 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5143 */
5144void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5145
5146/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005147 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5148 * rssi threshold triggered
5149 *
5150 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5151 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5152 * @gfp: context flags
5153 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005154 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005155 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5156 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5157 */
5158void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5159 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5160 gfp_t gfp);
5161
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005162/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005163 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5164 *
5165 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5166 * @gfp: context flags
5167 */
5168void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5169
5170/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005171 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5172 *
5173 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5174 */
5175void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5176
5177/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005178 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5179 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5180 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5181 *
5182 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5183 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5184 */
5185void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5186
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005187/**
5188 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5189 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005190 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005191 *
5192 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5193 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5194 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5195 */
5196void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5197 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5198
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005199/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005200 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5201 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5202 */
5203void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5204
5205/**
5206 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5207 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5208 */
5209void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5210
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005211/**
5212 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5213 *
5214 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5215 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5216 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5217 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5218 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5219 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5220 *
5221 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5222 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5223 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5224 */
5225void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5226 const u8 *addr);
5227
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005228/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005229 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5230 * @pubsta: station struct
5231 * @tid: the session's TID
5232 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5233 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5234 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5235 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5236 *
5237 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5238 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5239 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5240 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5241 */
5242void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5243 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5244 u16 received_mpdus);
5245
5246/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005247 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5248 *
5249 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5250 * buffer.
5251 *
5252 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5253 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5254 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5255 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5256 */
5257void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5258
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005259/**
5260 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5261 *
5262 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5263 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5264 * reordering.
5265 *
5266 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5267 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5268 *
5269 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5270 * @addr: station mac address
5271 * @tid: the rx tid
5272 */
5273void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5274 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5275
5276/**
5277 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5278 *
5279 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5280 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5281 * reordering.
5282 *
5283 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5284 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5285 *
5286 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5287 * @addr: station mac address
5288 * @tid: the rx tid
5289 */
5290void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5291 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5292
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005293/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005294
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005295/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005296 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005297 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005298 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5299 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5300 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005301 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5302 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005303 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5304 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5305 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5306 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5307 * RTS threshold
5308 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5309 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005310 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005311 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5312 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005313 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005314 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005315 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005316 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005317struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5318 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5319 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5320 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5321 struct sk_buff *skb;
5322 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5323 bool rts, short_preamble;
5324 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005325 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005326 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005327 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005328};
5329
5330struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005331 const char *name;
5332 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005333 void (*free)(void *priv);
5334
5335 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5336 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005337 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005338 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305339 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005340 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005341 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5342 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005343 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5344 void *priv_sta);
5345
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005346 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5347 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5348 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5349 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005350 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5351 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5352 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005353 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5354 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005355
5356 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5357 struct dentry *dir);
5358 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005359
5360 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005361};
5362
5363static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005364 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005365 int index)
5366{
5367 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5368}
5369
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005370/**
5371 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5372 *
5373 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5374 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5375 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5376 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5377 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5378 * not null.
5379 *
5380 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5381 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5382 *
5383 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5384 * that this may be null.
5385 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5386 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5387 */
5388bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5389 void *priv_sta,
5390 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5391
5392
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005393static inline s8
5394rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5395 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5396{
5397 int i;
5398
5399 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5400 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5401 return i;
5402
5403 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005404 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005405
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005406 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005407 return 0;
5408}
5409
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005410static inline
5411bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5412 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5413{
5414 unsigned int i;
5415
5416 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5417 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5418 return true;
5419 return false;
5420}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005421
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005422/**
5423 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5424 *
5425 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5426 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5427 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5428 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5429 *
5430 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5431 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5432 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5433 */
5434int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5435 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5436 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5437
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005438int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5439void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005440
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005441static inline bool
5442conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5443{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005444 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005445}
5446
5447static inline bool
5448conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5449{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005450 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5451 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005452}
5453
5454static inline bool
5455conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5456{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005457 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5458 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005459}
5460
5461static inline bool
5462conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5463{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005464 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005465}
5466
5467static inline bool
5468conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5469{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005470 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5471 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5472 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005473}
5474
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005475static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5476ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5477{
5478 if (p2p) {
5479 switch (type) {
5480 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5481 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5482 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5483 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5484 default:
5485 break;
5486 }
5487 }
5488 return type;
5489}
5490
5491static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5492ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5493{
5494 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5495}
5496
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005497/**
5498 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5499 *
5500 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5501 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5502 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5503 *
5504 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5505 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5506 * matching GroupId management frame.
5507 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5508 */
5509void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5510 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5511
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005512void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5513 int rssi_min_thold,
5514 int rssi_max_thold);
5515
5516void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005517
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005518/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005519 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005520 *
5521 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5522 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005523 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5524 *
5525 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5526 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005527 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005528int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5529
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005530/**
5531 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5532 * @vif: virtual interface
5533 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5534 * @gfp: allocation flags
5535 *
5536 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5537 */
5538void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5539 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5540 gfp_t gfp);
5541
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005542/**
5543 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5544 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5545 * @vif: virtual interface
5546 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5547 * @band: the band to transmit on
5548 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5549 *
5550 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5551 */
5552bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5554 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5555
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005556/**
5557 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5558 *
5559 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5560 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5561 *
5562 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5563 *
5564 * private:
5565 *
5566 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5567 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5568 */
5569struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5570 u32 next_tsf;
5571 bool has_next_tsf;
5572
5573 u8 absent;
5574
5575 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5576 struct {
5577 u32 start;
5578 u32 duration;
5579 u32 interval;
5580 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5581};
5582
5583/**
5584 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5585 *
5586 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5587 * @data: NoA tracking data
5588 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5589 *
5590 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5591 */
5592int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5593 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5594
5595/**
5596 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5597 *
5598 * @data: NoA tracking data
5599 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5600 */
5601void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5602
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005603/**
5604 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5605 * @vif: virtual interface
5606 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5607 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5608 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5609 * @gfp: allocation flags
5610 *
5611 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5612 */
5613void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5614 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5615 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005616
5617/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005618 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5619 *
5620 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5621 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5622 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5623 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5624 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5625 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5626 *
5627 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5628 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5629 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5630 *
5631 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5632 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5633 *
5634 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5635 */
5636int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5637
5638/**
5639 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5640 *
5641 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5642 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5643 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5644 *
5645 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5646 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5647 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5648 *
5649 * @sta: the station
5650 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5651 */
5652void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5653
5654/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005655 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5656 *
5657 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5658 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5659 *
5660 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5661 */
5662struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5663 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005664
5665/**
5666 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5667 *
5668 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5669 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5670 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5671 *
5672 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5673 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5674 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5675 */
5676void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5677 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5678 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005679#endif /* MAC80211_H */